1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2241–2280 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

50×40 Home Gym / Studio

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×40 Home Gym / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $36,600

12

50×40 Home Gym / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$41,700$36,600SAVE $5,100
or $763/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×40Home Gym / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×40 Home Gym / Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 50×40 home gym / studio fits 50-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Large private fitness, training, yoga, art, or hobby space with room for equipment.

You’re viewing:Home Gym / Studio·Size50×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$36,600$41,700Save $5,100
or as low as $763/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×40
50×40
this size
$36,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $22,500
  • Insulated
  • Wired Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X40-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

50 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 50×40 home gym / studio fits 50-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Cardio zoneWeight rackStretch / Bench50′ × 40′ · 2,000 sq ft · home-gym layout

Cardio zone · Weight rack · Stretch / Bench

Cardio zone at the front, weight rack in the middle, stretch / bench at the rear. Large private fitness, training, yoga, art, or hobby space with room for equipment zones, storage walls, and insulated comfort year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Home Gym / Studio at 50×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×40 Home Gym / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym / Studio spec sheet.

Width50′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space2,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym / studio
Everyday home gym / studio
2,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym / studio + seasonal storage
home gym / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×40 Home Gym / Studio, what makes it different.

2,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$763/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×40 home gym / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $763/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×40?

2,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 40′ footprint with 2,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $16,000–$24,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×40 Home Gym / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×40 Home Gym / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Gym / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$9,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym / Studio also viewed:

🏡 50×40

Metal Garage

50×40 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 50×40

Workshop / Hobby Shop

50×40 workshop / hobby shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →

🏡 50×40

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

50×40 metal carport / open shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →

🏢 50×40

Commercial Steel Building

50×40 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 50×40

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×40 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🌾 50×40

Metal Barn / Farm Building

50×40 metal barn / farm building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Farm Building →

🎯 50×40

Man Cave / She Shed

50×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 50×40

Warehouse / Factory Shop

50×40 warehouse / factory shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Factory Shop →

🏛️ 50×40

Government / Institutional Building

50×40 government / institutional building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Building →

🌾 50×40

Equestrian / Tack Building

50×40 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 50×40

Worship / Community Building

50×40 worship / community building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Community Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 50×40 home gym / studio cost?

A 50×40 home gym / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $36,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $763/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×40 home gym / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home gym / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×40 home gym / studio?

Almost always for 2,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×40 home gym / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×40 home gym / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×40 home gym / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $763/month on a 50×40 home gym / studio.

What warranty comes with the 50×40 home gym / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×40 home gym / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×40 home gym / studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym / studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$36,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

50×40 Home Gym / Studio

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$36,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel barn with brown roof, stacked hay bales, and tractors at golden hour

50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building | Steel and Stud, From $37,250

12

50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$42,450$37,250SAVE $5,200
or $776/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×40Metal Barn / Farm Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 50×40 metal barn / farm building fits 50-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Farm and ranch building for tractors, hay, feed, livestock supplies.

You’re viewing:Metal Barn / Farm Building·Size50×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$37,250$42,450Save $5,200
or as low as $776/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×40
50×40
this size
$37,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”7,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X40-METAL-BARN-FARM-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

50 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 50×40 metal barn / farm building fits 50-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage50′ × 40′ · 2,000 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Farm and ranch building for tractors, hay, feed, livestock supplies, implements, and protected maintenance space.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Barn / Farm Building at 50×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barn / Farm Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barn / Farm Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space2,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barn / Farm Building.

DAILY USEEveryday metal barn / farm building
Everyday metal barn / farm building
2,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barn / farm building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barn / farm building + seasonal storage
metal barn / farm building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building, what makes it different.

2,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$776/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×40 metal barn / farm building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $776/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×40?

2,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 40′ footprint with 2,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $16,000–$24,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barn / Farm Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Barn / Farm Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$9,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barn / Farm Building also viewed:

🏡 50×40

Metal Garage

50×40 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 50×40

Workshop / Hobby Shop

50×40 workshop / hobby shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →

🏡 50×40

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

50×40 metal carport / open shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →

🏢 50×40

Commercial Steel Building

50×40 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 50×40

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×40 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 50×40

Home Gym / Studio

50×40 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🎯 50×40

Man Cave / She Shed

50×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 50×40

Warehouse / Factory Shop

50×40 warehouse / factory shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Factory Shop →

🏛️ 50×40

Government / Institutional Building

50×40 government / institutional building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Building →

🌾 50×40

Equestrian / Tack Building

50×40 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 50×40

Worship / Community Building

50×40 worship / community building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Community Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barn / Farm Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×40 metal barn / farm building cost?

A 50×40 metal barn / farm building from Steel and Stud starts at $37,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $776/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×40 metal barn / farm building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal barn / farm building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×40 metal barn / farm building?

Almost always for 2,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barn / farm building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×40 metal barn / farm building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×40 metal barn / farm building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×40 metal barn / farm building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $776/month on a 50×40 metal barn / farm building.

What warranty comes with the 50×40 metal barn / farm building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×40 metal barn / farm building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×40 metal barn / farm building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barn / Farm Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$37,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel barn with brown roof, stacked hay bales, and tractors at golden hour

50×40 Metal Barn / Farm Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$37,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red commercial metal building beside a white country church with tall steeple

50×40 Man Cave / She Shed

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×40 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $36,600

12

50×40 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$41,700$36,600SAVE $5,100
or $763/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×40Man Cave / She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×40 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 50×40 man cave / she shed packs 2000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Personal retreat, game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or collection storage.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size50×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$36,600$41,700Save $5,100
or as low as $763/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×40
50×40
this size
$36,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $22,500
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

50 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 50×40 man cave / she shed packs 2000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage50′ × 40′ · 2,000 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Personal retreat, game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or collection storage.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed at 50×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×40 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width50′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space2,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
2,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×40 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

2,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$763/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×40 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $763/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×40?

2,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 40′ footprint with 2,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $16,000–$24,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×40 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×40 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$9,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 50×40

Metal Garage

50×40 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 50×40

Workshop / Hobby Shop

50×40 workshop / hobby shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →

🏡 50×40

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

50×40 metal carport / open shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →

🏢 50×40

Commercial Steel Building

50×40 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 50×40

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×40 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 50×40

Home Gym / Studio

50×40 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 50×40

Metal Barn / Farm Building

50×40 metal barn / farm building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Farm Building →

🏭 50×40

Warehouse / Factory Shop

50×40 warehouse / factory shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Factory Shop →

🏛️ 50×40

Government / Institutional Building

50×40 government / institutional building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Building →

🌾 50×40

Equestrian / Tack Building

50×40 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 50×40

Worship / Community Building

50×40 worship / community building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Community Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 50×40 man cave / she shed cost?

A 50×40 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $36,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $763/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×40 man cave / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×40 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 2,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×40 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×40 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×40 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $763/month on a 50×40 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 50×40 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×40 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×40 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$36,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red commercial metal building beside a white country church with tall steeple

50×40 Man Cave / She Shed

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$36,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop | Steel and Stud, From $38,850

12

50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$44,300$38,850SAVE $5,450
or $809/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×40Warehouse / Factory Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop? At 2000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

You’re viewing:Warehouse / Factory Shop·Size50×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$38,850$44,300Save $5,450
or as low as $809/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×40
50×40
this size
$38,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $26,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X40-WAREHOUSE-FACTORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

50 feet wide × 40 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. Looking for a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop? At 2000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Dock-height loading bayPALLET AISLESOffice + Break room50′ × 40′ · 2,000 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~40 pallets, light-duty forklift OK.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Factory Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Factory Shop spec sheet.

Width50′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space2,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Factory Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / factory shop
Everyday warehouse / factory shop
2,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / factory shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / factory shop + seasonal storage
warehouse / factory shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop, what makes it different.

2,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$809/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×40 warehouse / factory shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $809/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×40?

2,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 40′ footprint with 2,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $16,000–$24,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Factory Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Factory Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$9,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Factory Shop also viewed:

🏡 50×40

Metal Garage

50×40 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 50×40

Workshop / Hobby Shop

50×40 workshop / hobby shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →

🏡 50×40

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

50×40 metal carport / open shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →

🏢 50×40

Commercial Steel Building

50×40 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 50×40

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×40 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 50×40

Home Gym / Studio

50×40 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 50×40

Metal Barn / Farm Building

50×40 metal barn / farm building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Farm Building →

🎯 50×40

Man Cave / She Shed

50×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏛️ 50×40

Government / Institutional Building

50×40 government / institutional building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Building →

🌾 50×40

Equestrian / Tack Building

50×40 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 50×40

Worship / Community Building

50×40 worship / community building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Community Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Factory Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop cost?

A 50×40 warehouse / factory shop from Steel and Stud starts at $38,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $809/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×40 warehouse / factory shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse / factory shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop?

Almost always for 2,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / factory shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $809/month on a 50×40 warehouse / factory shop.

What warranty comes with the 50×40 warehouse / factory shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×40 warehouse / factory shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×40 warehouse / factory shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 50×40 warehouse / factory shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Factory Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$38,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

50×40 Warehouse / Factory Shop

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$38,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building with blue roof sheltering a backhoe at a busy public works yard

50×40 Government / Institutional Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×40 Government / Institutional Building | Steel and Stud, From $38,550

12

50×40 Government / Institutional Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$43,950$38,550SAVE $5,400
or $803/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×40Government / Institutional Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×40 Government / Institutional Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Our 50×40 government / institutional building fits 50-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Municipal storage, emergency response staging, school equipment.

You’re viewing:Government / Institutional Building·Size50×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$38,550$43,950Save $5,400
or as low as $803/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×40
50×40
this size
$38,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • Fire Code
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X40-GOVERNMENT-INSTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your government / institutional building layout.

50 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 50×40 government / institutional building fits 50-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE50′ × 40′ · 2,000 sq ft · government / institutional building layout

Government / Institutional Building layout.

Our 50×40 government / institutional building fits 50-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Municipal storage, emergency response staging, school equipment storage, field office, public works building, or maintenance shop with certified engineering.

💡 Pro tip:Government / Institutional Building at 50×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×40 Government / Institutional Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Government / Institutional Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Government / Institutional Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space2,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Government / Institutional Building.

DAILY USEEveryday government / institutional building
Everyday government / institutional building
2,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a government / institutional building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgovernment / institutional building + seasonal storage
government / institutional building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×40 Government / Institutional Building, what makes it different.

2,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$803/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×40 government / institutional building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $803/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×40?

2,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 40′ footprint with 2,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $16,000–$24,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Government / Institutional Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×40 Government / Institutional Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×40 Government / Institutional Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Government / Institutional Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$9,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Government / Institutional Building also viewed:

🏡 50×40

Metal Garage

50×40 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 50×40

Workshop / Hobby Shop

50×40 workshop / hobby shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →

🏡 50×40

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

50×40 metal carport / open shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →

🏢 50×40

Commercial Steel Building

50×40 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 50×40

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×40 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 50×40

Home Gym / Studio

50×40 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 50×40

Metal Barn / Farm Building

50×40 metal barn / farm building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Farm Building →

🎯 50×40

Man Cave / She Shed

50×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 50×40

Warehouse / Factory Shop

50×40 warehouse / factory shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Factory Shop →

🌾 50×40

Equestrian / Tack Building

50×40 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 50×40

Worship / Community Building

50×40 worship / community building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Community Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Government / Institutional Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×40 government / institutional building cost?

A 50×40 government / institutional building from Steel and Stud starts at $38,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $803/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×40 government / institutional building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud government / institutional building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×40 government / institutional building?

Almost always for 2,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud government / institutional building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×40 government / institutional building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×40 government / institutional building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×40 government / institutional building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $803/month on a 50×40 government / institutional building.

What warranty comes with the 50×40 government / institutional building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×40 government / institutional building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×40 government / institutional building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Government / Institutional Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$38,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building with blue roof sheltering a backhoe at a busy public works yard

50×40 Government / Institutional Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$38,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel building horse barn at twilight with lit aisle and landscape path lighting

50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building | Steel and Stud, From $37,250

12

50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$42,450$37,250SAVE $5,200
or $776/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×40Equestrian / Tack Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Large enclosed equestrian space for tack storage, feed storage, grooming areas, compact riding practice, stalls, or ranch operations with high clearance and ventilation options.

You’re viewing:Equestrian / Tack Building·Size50×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$37,250$42,450Save $5,200
or as low as $776/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×40
50×40
this size
$37,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X40-EQUESTRIAN-TACK-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-stall stable.

50 feet wide × 40 feet long. Full-height clearance supports hay loft (~80 bales). Large enclosed equestrian space for tack storage, feed storage, grooming areas, compact riding practice, stalls, or ranch operations with high clearance and ventilation options.

2 stalls + tack12-FT CENTER AISLEHay loft + Wash bay50′ × 40′ · 2,000 sq ft · multi-stall stable

2 stalls + tack · 12-ft center aisle · Hay loft + Wash bay

2 stalls + tack at the front, 12-ft center aisle in the middle, hay loft + wash bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 horses, full stable ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: hay loft, wash bay with hot water, feed room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian / Tack Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian / Tack Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space2,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian / Tack Building.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian / tack building
Everyday equestrian / tack building
2,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian / tack building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian / tack building + seasonal storage
equestrian / tack building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building, what makes it different.

2,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$776/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×40 equestrian / tack building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $776/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×40?

2,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 40′ footprint with 2,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $16,000–$24,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian / Tack Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian / Tack Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$9,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian / Tack Building also viewed:

🏡 50×40

Metal Garage

50×40 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 50×40

Workshop / Hobby Shop

50×40 workshop / hobby shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →

🏡 50×40

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

50×40 metal carport / open shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →

🏢 50×40

Commercial Steel Building

50×40 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 50×40

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×40 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 50×40

Home Gym / Studio

50×40 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 50×40

Metal Barn / Farm Building

50×40 metal barn / farm building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Farm Building →

🎯 50×40

Man Cave / She Shed

50×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 50×40

Warehouse / Factory Shop

50×40 warehouse / factory shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Factory Shop →

🏛️ 50×40

Government / Institutional Building

50×40 government / institutional building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Building →

🏛️ 50×40

Worship / Community Building

50×40 worship / community building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Community Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian / Tack Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×40 equestrian / tack building cost?

A 50×40 equestrian / tack building from Steel and Stud starts at $37,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $776/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×40 equestrian / tack building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equestrian / tack building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×40 equestrian / tack building?

Almost always for 2,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian / tack building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×40 equestrian / tack building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×40 equestrian / tack building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×40 equestrian / tack building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $776/month on a 50×40 equestrian / tack building.

What warranty comes with the 50×40 equestrian / tack building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×40 equestrian / tack building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×40 equestrian / tack building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian / Tack Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$37,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel building horse barn at twilight with lit aisle and landscape path lighting

50×40 Equestrian / Tack Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$37,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

50×40 Worship / Community Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×40 Worship / Community Building | Steel and Stud, From $38,550

12

50×40 Worship / Community Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$43,950$38,550SAVE $5,400
or $803/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×40Worship / Community Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×40 Worship / Community Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 50×40 worship / community building packs 2000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

You’re viewing:Worship / Community Building·Size50×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$38,550$43,950Save $5,400
or as low as $803/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×40
50×40
this size
$38,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X40-WORSHIP-COMMUNITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

50 feet wide × 40 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 50×40 worship / community building packs 2000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS50′ × 40′ · 2,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~200 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×40 Worship / Community Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship / Community Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship / Community Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space2,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship / Community Building.

DAILY USEEveryday worship / community building
Everyday worship / community building
2,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship / community building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship / community building + seasonal storage
worship / community building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×40 Worship / Community Building, what makes it different.

2,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$803/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×40 worship / community building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $803/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×40?

2,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 40′ footprint with 2,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $16,000–$24,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship / Community Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×40 Worship / Community Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×40 Worship / Community Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship / Community Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$9,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship / Community Building also viewed:

🏡 50×40

Metal Garage

50×40 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 50×40

Workshop / Hobby Shop

50×40 workshop / hobby shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →

🏡 50×40

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

50×40 metal carport / open shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →

🏢 50×40

Commercial Steel Building

50×40 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 50×40

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×40 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 50×40

Home Gym / Studio

50×40 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 50×40

Metal Barn / Farm Building

50×40 metal barn / farm building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Farm Building →

🎯 50×40

Man Cave / She Shed

50×40 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$36,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 50×40

Warehouse / Factory Shop

50×40 warehouse / factory shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Factory Shop →

🏛️ 50×40

Government / Institutional Building

50×40 government / institutional building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Building →

🌾 50×40

Equestrian / Tack Building

50×40 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship / Community Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×40 worship / community building cost?

A 50×40 worship / community building from Steel and Stud starts at $38,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $803/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×40 worship / community building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud worship / community building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×40 worship / community building?

Almost always for 2,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship / community building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×40 worship / community building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×40 worship / community building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×40 worship / community building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $803/month on a 50×40 worship / community building.

What warranty comes with the 50×40 worship / community building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×40 worship / community building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×40 worship / community building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship / Community Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$38,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

50×40 Worship / Community Building

2,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×40 steel building delivers 2,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$38,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

50×60 Commercial Warehouse

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Commercial Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $56,750

12

50×60 Commercial Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$64,700$56,750SAVE $7,950
or $1182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Commercial Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Commercial Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

3,000 sq ft warehouse for inventory, pallet storage, contractor materials, business supplies, and fulfillment staging. Add roll-up doors, office partitions, and insulation as needed.

You’re viewing:Commercial Warehouse·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$56,750$64,700Save $7,950
or as low as $1182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$56,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”8,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-COMMERCIAL-WAREHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. 3,000 sq ft warehouse for inventory, pallet storage, contractor materials, business supplies, and fulfillment staging.

Dock-height loading bayPallet aislesOFFICE + BREAK ROOM50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~60 pallets, light-duty forklift OK. Add roll-up doors, office partitions, and insulation as needed.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Commercial Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Warehouse spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial warehouse
Everyday commercial warehouse
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial warehouse + seasonal storage
commercial warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Commercial Warehouse, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 commercial warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Commercial Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Commercial Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Warehouse also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 commercial warehouse cost?

A 50×60 commercial warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $56,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 commercial warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 commercial warehouse?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 commercial warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 commercial warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 commercial warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1182/month on a 50×60 commercial warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 commercial warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 commercial warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×60 commercial warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

50×60 Commercial Warehouse

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building with red trim housing a logistics company and delivery van fleet

50×60 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $56,750

12

50×60 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$64,700$56,750SAVE $7,950
or $1182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Park work trucks, service vans, trailers, landscaping vehicles, or municipal fleet equipment under one enclosed roof. Multiple roll-up doors keep daily vehicle movement simple.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$56,750$64,700Save $7,950
or as low as $1182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$56,750
50×75
longer
$70,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $24,500
  • Fleet Ready
  • Multi-Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Park work trucks, service vans, trailers, landscaping vehicles, or municipal fleet equipment under one enclosed roof.

5 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

5 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

5 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 5 vehicles + full hobby shop. Multiple roll-up doors keep daily vehicle movement simple.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 fleet garage cost?

A 50×60 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $56,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 fleet garage?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1182/month on a 50×60 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×60 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building with red trim housing a logistics company and delivery van fleet

50×60 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal barn glowing at foggy dawn with a tractor parked in the lit bay

50×60 Farm Equipment Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Farm Equipment Building | Steel and Stud, From $55,550

12

50×60 Farm Equipment Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$63,350$55,550SAVE $7,800
or $1157/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Farm Equipment Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Farm Equipment Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 50×60 farm equipment building packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Store tractors, hay equipment, feed, implements, sprayers, trailers, and ranch supplies. Add lean-tos.

You’re viewing:Farm Equipment Building·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$55,550$63,350Save $7,800
or as low as $1157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$55,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $29,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-FARM-EQUIPMENT-BBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 50×60 farm equipment building packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Tractor bayImplement bayTool rack50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

Tractor bay · Implement bay · Tool rack

Tractor bay at the front, implement bay in the middle, tool rack at the rear. Store tractors, hay equipment, feed, implements, sprayers, trailers, and ranch supplies.

💡 Pro tip:Farm Equipment Building at 50×60, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Farm Equipment Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Farm Equipment Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Farm Equipment Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Farm Equipment Building.

DAILY USEEveryday farm equipment building
Everyday farm equipment building
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a farm equipment building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfarm equipment building + seasonal storage
farm equipment building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Farm Equipment Building, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 farm equipment building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Farm Equipment Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Farm Equipment Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Farm Equipment Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Farm Equipment Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Farm Equipment Building also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Farm Equipment Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 farm equipment building cost?

A 50×60 farm equipment building from Steel and Stud starts at $55,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 farm equipment building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud farm equipment building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 farm equipment building?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud farm equipment building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 farm equipment building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 farm equipment building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 farm equipment building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1157/month on a 50×60 farm equipment building.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 farm equipment building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 farm equipment building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×60 farm equipment building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Farm Equipment Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$55,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal barn glowing at foggy dawn with a tractor parked in the lit bay

50×60 Farm Equipment Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$55,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial | Steel and Stud, From $57,150

12

50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$65,150$57,150SAVE $8,000
or $1191/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Manufacturing / Light Industrial

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial? At 3000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Clear-span floor space for production lines, machinery, fabrication tables.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing / Light Industrial·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$57,150$65,150Save $8,000
or as low as $1191/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$57,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Code Certified
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-MANUFACTURING-LIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Looking for a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial? At 3000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Clear-span floor space for production lines, machinery, fabrication tables, inventory staging, and equipment maintenance.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing / Light Industrial at 50×60, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing / Light Industrial.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing / Light Industrial spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing / Light Industrial.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing / light industrial
Everyday manufacturing / light industrial
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing / light industrial.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing / light industrial + seasonal storage
manufacturing / light industrial + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1191/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1191/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing / Light Industrial shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing / Light Industrial · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing / Light Industrial also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing / Light Industrial questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial cost?

A 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial from Steel and Stud starts at $57,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1191/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing / light industrial ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing / light industrial different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1191/month on a 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 50×60 manufacturing / light industrial ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing / Light Industrial quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$57,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

50×60 Manufacturing / Light Industrial

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$57,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure at twilight with lit metal service bays reflecting on wet pavement

50×60 RV & Boat Storage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 RV & Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $54,900

12

50×60 RV & Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$62,600$54,900SAVE $7,700
or $1144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60RV & Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 RV & Boat Storage, built for daily backyard use.

50×60 delivers 3000 sq ft of everyday rv & boat storage space. Store motorhomes, fifth wheels, boats, trailers, jet skis, ATVs, and seasonal vehicles. Tall leg heights and oversized roll-up doors protect large.

You’re viewing:RV & Boat Storage·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$54,900$62,600Save $7,700
or as low as $1144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$54,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $32,500
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Large Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. 50×60 delivers 3000 sq ft of everyday rv & boat storage space.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. Store motorhomes, fifth wheels, boats, trailers, jet skis, ATVs, and seasonal vehicles.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 RV & Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat storage
Everyday rv & boat storage
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat storage + seasonal storage
rv & boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 RV & Boat Storage, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 rv & boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 RV & Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 RV & Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Storage also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 rv & boat storage cost?

A 50×60 rv & boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $54,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 rv & boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 rv & boat storage?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 rv & boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 rv & boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 rv & boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1144/month on a 50×60 rv & boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 rv & boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 rv & boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 50×60 rv & boat storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 50×60 rv & boat storage typically adds $24,000–$36,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$54,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure at twilight with lit metal service bays reflecting on wet pavement

50×60 RV & Boat Storage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$54,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit training facility at sunset with young athletes carrying gym bags

50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility | Steel and Stud, From $54,900

12

50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$62,600$54,900SAVE $7,700
or $1144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Indoor Sports / Training Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Build a private athletic space for batting cages, pickleball practice, martial arts, strength training, turf lanes, or indoor practice. Insulation and HVAC-ready framing keep it usable year-round.

You’re viewing:Indoor Sports / Training Facility·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$54,900$62,600Save $7,700
or as low as $1144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$54,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $24,000
  • Insulated
  • Clear Span
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-INDOOR-SPORTS-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Build a private athletic space for batting cages, pickleball practice, martial arts, strength training, turf lanes, or indoor practice.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Insulation and HVAC-ready framing keep it usable year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Sports / Training Facility at 50×60, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports / Training Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports / Training Facility spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports / Training Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports / training facility
Everyday indoor sports / training facility
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports / training facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports / training facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports / training facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 indoor sports / training facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports / Training Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports / Training Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports / Training Facility also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports / Training Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 indoor sports / training facility cost?

A 50×60 indoor sports / training facility from Steel and Stud starts at $54,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 indoor sports / training facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor sports / training facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 indoor sports / training facility?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports / training facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 indoor sports / training facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 indoor sports / training facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 indoor sports / training facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1144/month on a 50×60 indoor sports / training facility.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 indoor sports / training facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 indoor sports / training facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×60 indoor sports / training facility for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports / training facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports / Training Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$54,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit training facility at sunset with young athletes carrying gym bags

50×60 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$54,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building service shop with red roof and three glass sectional doors

50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building | Steel and Stud, From $56,750

12

50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$64,700$56,750SAVE $7,950
or $1182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Auto Shop / Service Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

50×60 delivers 3000 sq ft of code-compliant auto shop / service building space. Service bays, vehicle detailing, tire storage, lift-ready work areas, and customer-facing office space. Add multiple roll-up doors, walk-in.

You’re viewing:Auto Shop / Service Building·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$56,750$64,700Save $7,950
or as low as $1182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$56,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $38,500
  • Lift Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-AUTO-SHOP-SERVICBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your auto shop / service building layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. 50×60 delivers 3000 sq ft of code-compliant auto shop / service building space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · auto shop / service building layout

Auto Shop / Service Building layout.

50×60 delivers 3000 sq ft of code-compliant auto shop / service building space. Service bays, vehicle detailing, tire storage, lift-ready work areas, and customer-facing office space. Add multiple roll-up doors, walk-in doors, insulation, and interior partitions.

💡 Pro tip:Auto Shop / Service Building at 50×60, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Shop / Service Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Shop / Service Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Shop / Service Building.

DAILY USEEveryday auto shop / service building
Everyday auto shop / service building
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto shop / service building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto shop / service building + seasonal storage
auto shop / service building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 auto shop / service building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Shop / Service Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Shop / Service Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Shop / Service Building also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Shop / Service Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 auto shop / service building cost?

A 50×60 auto shop / service building from Steel and Stud starts at $56,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 auto shop / service building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto shop / service building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 auto shop / service building?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto shop / service building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 auto shop / service building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 auto shop / service building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 auto shop / service building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1182/month on a 50×60 auto shop / service building.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 auto shop / service building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 auto shop / service building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×60 auto shop / service building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Shop / Service Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building service shop with red roof and three glass sectional doors

50×60 Auto Shop / Service Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space | Steel and Stud, From $55,550

12

50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$63,350$55,550SAVE $7,800
or $1157/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Horse Barn / Riding Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 50×60 horse barn / riding space packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Room for tack storage, feed, grooming areas, small riding practice, or stalls with open equipment.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn / Riding Space·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$55,550$63,350Save $7,800
or as low as $1157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$55,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $34,500
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-HORSE-BARN-RIDINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-stall stable.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Full-height clearance supports hay loft (~160 bales). Built for farm and ranch operations, this 50×60 horse barn / riding space packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

4 stalls + tack12-FT CENTER AISLEHay loft + Wash bay50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · multi-stall stable

4 stalls + tack · 12-ft center aisle · Hay loft + Wash bay

4 stalls + tack at the front, 12-ft center aisle in the middle, hay loft + wash bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses, full stable ops. Room for tack storage, feed, grooming areas, small riding practice, or stalls with open equipment space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: hay loft, wash bay with hot water, feed room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn / Riding Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn / Riding Space spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn / Riding Space.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn / riding space
Everyday horse barn / riding space
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn / riding space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn / riding space + seasonal storage
horse barn / riding space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 horse barn / riding space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn / Riding Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn / Riding Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn / Riding Space also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn / Riding Space questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 horse barn / riding space cost?

A 50×60 horse barn / riding space from Steel and Stud starts at $55,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 horse barn / riding space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn / riding space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 horse barn / riding space?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn / riding space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 horse barn / riding space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 horse barn / riding space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 horse barn / riding space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1157/month on a 50×60 horse barn / riding space.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 horse barn / riding space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 horse barn / riding space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×60 horse barn / riding space stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn / Riding Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$55,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

50×60 Horse Barn / Riding Space

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$55,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage in winter with a snowplow truck inside and salt spreader truck outside

50×60 Municipal / Government Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Municipal / Government Building | Steel and Stud, From $56,850

12

50×60 Municipal / Government Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$64,800$56,850SAVE $7,950
or $1184/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Municipal / Government Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Municipal / Government Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 50×60 municipal / government building packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Public works storage, emergency response staging, vehicle storage.

You’re viewing:Municipal / Government Building·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$56,850$64,800Save $7,950
or as low as $1184/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$56,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • Code Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal / government building layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 50×60 municipal / government building packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · municipal / government building layout

Municipal / Government Building layout.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 50×60 municipal / government building packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Public works storage, emergency response staging, vehicle storage, maintenance bays, or equipment shelters with permit-ready stamped drawings and higher wind certifications.

💡 Pro tip:Municipal / Government Building at 50×60, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Municipal / Government Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Government Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Government Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Government Building.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / government building
Everyday municipal / government building
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / government building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / government building + seasonal storage
municipal / government building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Municipal / Government Building, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1184/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 municipal / government building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1184/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Government Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Municipal / Government Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Municipal / Government Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Government Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Government Building also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Government Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 municipal / government building cost?

A 50×60 municipal / government building from Steel and Stud starts at $56,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1184/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 municipal / government building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud municipal / government building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 municipal / government building?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / government building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 municipal / government building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 municipal / government building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 municipal / government building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1184/month on a 50×60 municipal / government building.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 municipal / government building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 municipal / government building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×60 municipal / government building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Government Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$56,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage in winter with a snowplow truck inside and salt spreader truck outside

50×60 Municipal / Government Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$56,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building with full glass gable storefront and customer parking out front

50×60 Retail / Showroom Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Retail / Showroom Building | Steel and Stud, From $56,750

12

50×60 Retail / Showroom Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$64,700$56,750SAVE $7,950
or $1182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Retail / Showroom Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Retail / Showroom Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 50×60 retail / showroom building packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Display equipment, furniture, vehicles, building supplies, or inventory in.

You’re viewing:Retail / Showroom Building·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$56,750$64,700Save $7,950
or as low as $1182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$56,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Storefront
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-RETAIL-SHOWROOM-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 50×60 retail / showroom building packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~1800 sf showroom, 900 sf stock. Display equipment, furniture, vehicles, building supplies, or inventory in a clear-span showroom with storefront glass, customer entries, insulation, and branded color packages.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Retail / Showroom Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail / Showroom Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail / Showroom Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail / Showroom Building.

DAILY USEEveryday retail / showroom building
Everyday retail / showroom building
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail / showroom building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail / showroom building + seasonal storage
retail / showroom building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Retail / Showroom Building, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 retail / showroom building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail / Showroom Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Retail / Showroom Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Retail / Showroom Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail / Showroom Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail / Showroom Building also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail / Showroom Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 retail / showroom building cost?

A 50×60 retail / showroom building from Steel and Stud starts at $56,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 retail / showroom building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail / showroom building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 retail / showroom building?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail / showroom building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 retail / showroom building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 retail / showroom building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 retail / showroom building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1182/month on a 50×60 retail / showroom building.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 retail / showroom building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 retail / showroom building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×60 retail / showroom building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail / Showroom Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building with full glass gable storefront and customer parking out front

50×60 Retail / Showroom Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$56,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel structure with lean-to canopy sheltering a green tractor and boat

50×60 Contractor Storage Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Contractor Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $57,150

12

50×60 Contractor Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$65,150$57,150SAVE $8,000
or $1191/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Contractor Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Contractor Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 50×60 contractor storage building? At 3000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Secure storage for tools, lifts, scaffolding, materials, trailers, generators, and.

You’re viewing:Contractor Storage Building·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$57,150$65,150Save $8,000
or as low as $1191/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$57,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $34,500
  • Secure Storage
  • Large Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Looking for a 50×60 contractor storage building? At 3000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Inventory racksLoading bayOffice / Desk50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Secure storage for tools, lifts, scaffolding, materials, trailers, generators, and jobsite equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Storage Building at 50×60, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Contractor Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage Building spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage building
Everyday contractor storage building
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage building + seasonal storage
contractor storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Contractor Storage Building, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1191/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 contractor storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1191/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Contractor Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Contractor Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏛️ 50×60

Community / Worship Hall

50×60 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 contractor storage building cost?

A 50×60 contractor storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $57,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1191/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 contractor storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 contractor storage building?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 contractor storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 contractor storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 contractor storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1191/month on a 50×60 contractor storage building.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 contractor storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 contractor storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×60 contractor storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 50×60 contractor storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$57,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel structure with lean-to canopy sheltering a green tractor and boat

50×60 Contractor Storage Building

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$57,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building church at golden hour as a family walks to the covered entry

50×60 Community / Worship Hall

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×60 Community / Worship Hall | Steel and Stud, From $56,850

12

50×60 Community / Worship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$64,800$56,850SAVE $7,950
or $1184/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×60Community / Worship Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×60 Community / Worship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

50×60 delivers 3000 sq ft of public-use community / worship hall space.

You’re viewing:Community / Worship Hall·Size50×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$56,850$64,800Save $7,950
or as low as $1184/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×60
50×60
this size
$56,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X60-COMMUNITY-WORSHIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

50 feet wide × 60 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. 50×60 delivers 3000 sq ft of public-use community / worship hall space.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS50′ × 60′ · 3,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~300 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×60 Community / Worship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Worship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Worship Hall spec sheet.

Width50′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Worship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday community / worship hall
Everyday community / worship hall
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / worship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / worship hall + seasonal storage
community / worship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×60 Community / Worship Hall, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1184/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×60 community / worship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1184/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×60?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 60′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Worship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×60 Community / Worship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×60 Community / Worship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Worship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Worship Hall also viewed:

🏢 50×60

Commercial Warehouse

50×60 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 50×60

Fleet Garage

50×60 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 50×60

Farm Equipment Building

50×60 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 50×60

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

50×60 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 50×60

RV & Boat Storage

50×60 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 50×60

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×60 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 50×60

Auto Shop / Service Building

50×60 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 50×60

Horse Barn / Riding Space

50×60 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$55,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 50×60

Municipal / Government Building

50×60 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 50×60

Retail / Showroom Building

50×60 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$56,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 50×60

Contractor Storage Building

50×60 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$57,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Worship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 50×60 community / worship hall cost?

A 50×60 community / worship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $56,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1184/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×60 community / worship hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / worship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×60 community / worship hall?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / worship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×60 community / worship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×60 community / worship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×60 community / worship hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1184/month on a 50×60 community / worship hall.

What warranty comes with the 50×60 community / worship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×60 community / worship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×60 community / worship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Worship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$56,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building church at golden hour as a family walks to the covered entry

50×60 Community / Worship Hall

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

50′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×60 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$56,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with large open bay showing workbenches, tool chests, and an American flag

50×90 Fabrication Shop

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $84,200

12

50×90 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,000$84,200SAVE $11,800
or $1754/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Fabrication Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 50×90 fabrication shop fits 50-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Small manufacturers and weld shops use the full 90-foot clear span to run a fabrication line.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,200$96,000Save $11,800
or as low as $1754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×75
smaller
$70,500
50×90
this size
$84,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 14×14 Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Our 50×90 fabrication shop fits 50-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Small manufacturers and weld shops use the full 90-foot clear span to run a fabrication line end-to-end.

💡 Pro tip:14×14 Roll-Up Door. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 fabrication shop cost?

A 50×90 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $84,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1754/month on a 50×90 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×90 fabrication shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with large open bay showing workbenches, tool chests, and an American flag

50×90 Fabrication Shop

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with blue roof and six blue roll-up garage bays

50×90 Commercial Garage

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Commercial Garage | Steel and Stud, From $84,200

12

50×90 Commercial Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,000$84,200SAVE $11,800
or $1754/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Commercial Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Commercial Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 50×90 commercial garage? At 4500 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Auto shops and fleet garages park four bays deep along the 90-foot wall, leaving the center open for.

You’re viewing:Commercial Garage·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,200$96,000Save $11,800
or as low as $1754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$84,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Three 12×12 Roll-Ups
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-COMMERCIAL-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 50×90 commercial garage? At 4500 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

5 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

5 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

5 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 5 vehicles + full hobby shop. Auto shops and fleet garages park four bays deep along the 90-foot wall, leaving the center open for a lift.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Commercial Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Garage spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial garage
Everyday commercial garage
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial garage + seasonal storage
commercial garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Commercial Garage, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 commercial garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Commercial Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Commercial Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Garage also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 commercial garage cost?

A 50×90 commercial garage from Steel and Stud starts at $84,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 commercial garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 commercial garage?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 commercial garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 commercial garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 commercial garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1754/month on a 50×90 commercial garage.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 commercial garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 commercial garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×90 commercial garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with blue roof and six blue roll-up garage bays

50×90 Commercial Garage

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray residential metal building with timber porch and glass garage door glowing at dusk

50×90 Barndominium

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Barndominium | Steel and Stud, From $82,350

12

50×90 Barndominium
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$93,900$82,350SAVE $11,550
or $1716/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Barndominium

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Barndominium, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 50×90 barndominium packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Barndo builders split the 90 feet into 40 ft of living space and 50 ft of workshop or garage. A.

You’re viewing:Barndominium·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$82,350$93,900Save $11,550
or as low as $1716/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×75
smaller
$68,650
50×90
this size
$82,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-BARNDOMINIUMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 50×90 barndominium packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Bedroom(s)Great room / KitchenBath / Mech50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · barndominium shell

Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech

Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. Barndo builders split the 90 feet into 40 ft of living space and 50 ft of workshop or garage.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Plans.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Barndominium in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium
Everyday barndominium
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium + seasonal storage
barndominium + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Barndominium, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1716/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 barndominium is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1716/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Barndominium buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Barndominium

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 barndominium cost?

A 50×90 barndominium from Steel and Stud starts at $82,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1716/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 barndominium price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud barndominium ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 barndominium?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 barndominium need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 barndominium delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 barndominium without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1716/month on a 50×90 barndominium.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 barndominium?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 barndominium in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 50×90 barndominium add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 50×90 barndominium typically adds $36,000–$54,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$82,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray residential metal building with timber porch and glass garage door glowing at dusk

50×90 Barndominium

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$82,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open sliding doors revealing wooden horse stalls at evening light

50×90 Horse Barn

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $83,000

12

50×90 Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$94,600$83,000SAVE $11,600
or $1729/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Horse Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 50×90 horse barn fits 50-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Farmers run a 12-foot center aisle down the 90-foot length with stalls on each side, and.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$83,000$94,600Save $11,600
or as low as $1729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$83,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • 12′ Center Aisle
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-HORSE-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-stall stable.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Full-height clearance supports hay loft (~240 bales). Our 50×90 horse barn fits 50-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

6 stalls + tack12-FT CENTER AISLEHay loft + Wash bay50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · multi-stall stable

6 stalls + tack · 12-ft center aisle · Hay loft + Wash bay

6 stalls + tack at the front, 12-ft center aisle in the middle, hay loft + wash bay at the rear. Capacity: 6 horses, full stable ops. Farmers run a 12-foot center aisle down the 90-foot length with stalls on each side, and you’ll fit 10-12 standard stalls plus a tack room and wash bay.

💡 Pro tip:12′ Center Aisle. Size affords: hay loft, wash bay with hot water, feed room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn
Everyday horse barn
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn + seasonal storage
horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Horse Barn, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 horse barn cost?

A 50×90 horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $83,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 horse barn?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 horse barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1729/month on a 50×90 horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×90 horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$83,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open sliding doors revealing wooden horse stalls at evening light

50×90 Horse Barn

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$83,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

50×90 Warehouse

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $84,600

12

50×90 Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,450$84,600SAVE $11,850
or $1763/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Warehouse, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 50×90 warehouse? At 4500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Small business owners use the 16-20 ft leg height to stack three rows of pallet racking inside. A 50×90.

You’re viewing:Warehouse·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,600$96,450Save $11,850
or as low as $1763/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$84,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 14×14 Roll-Up
  • 16′-20′ Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-WAREHOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. Looking for a 50×90 warehouse? At 4500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Dock-height loading bayPALLET AISLESOffice + Break room50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~90 pallets, light-duty forklift OK. Small business owners use the 16-20 ft leg height to stack three rows of pallet racking inside.

💡 Pro tip:Loading Dock Ready. Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse
Everyday warehouse
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse + seasonal storage
warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Warehouse, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1763/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1763/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 warehouse cost?

A 50×90 warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $84,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1763/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 warehouse?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1763/month on a 50×90 warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×90 warehouse handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 50×90 warehouse ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

50×90 Warehouse

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage service shop with SUV raised on a lift in the open bay

50×90 Auto Repair Shop

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $84,200

12

50×90 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,000$84,200SAVE $11,800
or $1754/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Auto Repair Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

50×90 delivers 4500 sq ft of code-compliant auto repair shop space. Auto repair shops set three two-post lifts along the 90-foot wall with a parts and tool aisle behind them. The 40-foot clear span means lifts go.

You’re viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,200$96,000Save $11,800
or as low as $1754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×75
smaller
$70,500
50×90
this size
$84,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Partition
  • Three Bay Doors
  • 14′ Eave Height
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your service-bay layout.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. 50×90 delivers 4500 sq ft of code-compliant auto repair shop space.

Lift bay 1LIFT BAY 2Parts / tools50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · service-bay layout

Lift bay 1 · Lift bay 2 · Parts / tools

Lift bay 1 at the front, lift bay 2 in the middle, parts / tools at the rear. Auto repair shops set three two-post lifts along the 90-foot wall with a parts and tool aisle behind them.

💡 Pro tip:14′ Eave Height.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Auto Repair Shop, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 auto repair shop cost?

A 50×90 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $84,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 auto repair shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1754/month on a 50×90 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×90 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage service shop with SUV raised on a lift in the open bay

50×90 Auto Repair Shop

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

50×90 Equipment Storage Barn

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Equipment Storage Barn | Steel and Stud, From $83,000

12

50×90 Equipment Storage Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$94,600$83,000SAVE $11,600
or $1729/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Equipment Storage Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Equipment Storage Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 50×90 equipment storage barn fits 50-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Farmers store a full equipment fleet (combine, two tractors, planter, and disc).

You’re viewing:Equipment Storage Barn·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$83,000$94,600Save $11,600
or as low as $1729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$83,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable End
  • Drive-Through Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Our 50×90 equipment storage barn fits 50-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Farmers store a full equipment fleet (combine, two tractors, planter, and disc) under one roof with room to drive in and out.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Layout.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Equipment Storage Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Barn spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage barn
Everyday equipment storage barn
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage barn + seasonal storage
equipment storage barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Equipment Storage Barn, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 equipment storage barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Equipment Storage Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Equipment Storage Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Barn also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 equipment storage barn cost?

A 50×90 equipment storage barn from Steel and Stud starts at $83,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 equipment storage barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment storage barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 equipment storage barn?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 equipment storage barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 equipment storage barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 equipment storage barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1729/month on a 50×90 equipment storage barn.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 equipment storage barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 equipment storage barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×90 equipment storage barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$83,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

50×90 Equipment Storage Barn

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$83,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

50×90 Fleet Garage

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $84,600

12

50×90 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,450$84,600SAVE $11,850
or $1763/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Fleet Garage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 50×90 fleet garage? At 4500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Contractors with a truck and trailer fleet park six to eight work trucks inside, plus tow trailers and.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,600$96,450Save $11,850
or as low as $1763/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×75
smaller
$70,900
50×90
this size
$84,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Two 12×12 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through Layout
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 50×90 fleet garage? At 4500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

5 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

5 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

5 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 5 vehicles + full hobby shop. Contractors with a truck and trailer fleet park six to eight work trucks inside, plus tow trailers and skid steers along the back wall.

💡 Pro tip:Pull-Through Layout. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1763/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1763/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 fleet garage cost?

A 50×90 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $84,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1763/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 fleet garage?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1763/month on a 50×90 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×90 fleet garage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 50×90 fleet garage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

50×90 Fleet Garage

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building fabrication shop at sunset with a flatbed truck hauling steel tube

50×90 Workshop Kit

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Workshop Kit | Steel and Stud, From $84,600

12

50×90 Workshop Kit
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,450$84,600SAVE $11,850
or $1763/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Workshop Kit

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Workshop Kit, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 50×90 workshop kit packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Serious hobbyists and tradespeople spec the 50×90 workshop kit for a full home shop.

You’re viewing:Workshop Kit·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,600$96,450Save $11,850
or as low as $1763/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$84,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Free 3D Design
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-WORKSHOP-KITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 50×90 workshop kit packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Serious hobbyists and tradespeople spec the 50×90 workshop kit for a full home shop.

💡 Pro tip:Free 3D Design. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Workshop Kit in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Kit.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Kit spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Kit.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop kit
Everyday workshop kit
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop kit.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop kit + seasonal storage
workshop kit + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Workshop Kit, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1763/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 workshop kit is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1763/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Kit shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Workshop Kit buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Workshop Kit

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop Kit · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Kit also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Kit questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 workshop kit cost?

A 50×90 workshop kit from Steel and Stud starts at $84,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1763/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 workshop kit price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop kit ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 workshop kit?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop kit different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 workshop kit need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 workshop kit delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 workshop kit without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1763/month on a 50×90 workshop kit.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 workshop kit?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 workshop kit in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×90 workshop kit handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 50×90 workshop kit ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Kit quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building fabrication shop at sunset with a flatbed truck hauling steel tube

50×90 Workshop Kit

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building repair shop in autumn with flatbed tow truck delivering a sedan

50×90 RV & Boat Storage

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 RV & Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $82,350

12

50×90 RV & Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$93,900$82,350SAVE $11,550
or $1716/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90RV & Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 RV & Boat Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 50×90 rv & boat storage packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Storage operators fit eight to ten Class A motorhomes in two rows down the 90-foot length.

You’re viewing:RV & Boat Storage·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$82,350$93,900Save $11,550
or as low as $1716/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$82,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 20′ Eave Height
  • Two 14×14 Doors
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 50×90 rv & boat storage packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. Storage operators fit eight to ten Class A motorhomes in two rows down the 90-foot length, or run a single deep row of boats on trailers.

💡 Pro tip:Pull-Through Bays. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 RV & Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat storage
Everyday rv & boat storage
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat storage + seasonal storage
rv & boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 RV & Boat Storage, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1716/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 rv & boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1716/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 RV & Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 RV & Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Storage also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 rv & boat storage cost?

A 50×90 rv & boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $82,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1716/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 rv & boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 rv & boat storage?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 rv & boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 rv & boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 rv & boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1716/month on a 50×90 rv & boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 rv & boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 rv & boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×90 rv & boat storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & boat storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$82,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building repair shop in autumn with flatbed tow truck delivering a sedan

50×90 RV & Boat Storage

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$82,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building shop with glass gable storefront glowing at golden hour as shoppers enter

50×90 Retail & Showroom

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $84,200

12

50×90 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,000$84,200SAVE $11,800
or $1754/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Retail & Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 50×90 retail & showroom packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Small business owners build out the front 30 feet as a customer-facing showroom.

You’re viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,200$96,000Save $11,800
or as low as $1754/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$84,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • Two-Tone Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 50×90 retail & showroom packs 4500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~2700 sf showroom, 1350 sf stock. Small business owners build out the front 30 feet as a customer-facing showroom with storefront windows and split the back 60 feet into warehouse and shipping.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Tone Walls. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Retail & Showroom, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1754/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1754/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏛️ 50×90

Church & Event Hall

50×90 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 retail & showroom cost?

A 50×90 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $84,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1754/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 retail & showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1754/month on a 50×90 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×90 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building shop with glass gable storefront glowing at golden hour as shoppers enter

50×90 Retail & Showroom

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel structure church in three quarter view with cross, stained glass, and stone base

50×90 Church & Event Hall

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

50×90 Church & Event Hall | Steel and Stud, From $84,300

12

50×90 Church & Event Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$96,100$84,300SAVE $11,800
or $1756/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings50×90Church & Event Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×90 Church & Event Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

50×90 delivers 4500 sq ft of public-use church & event hall space. Small congregations and event hosts use the full 3,4500 sq ft as an open assembly room seating roughly 300 in rows or 200 at round tables. The 40-foot.

You’re viewing:Church & Event Hall·Size50×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$84,300$96,100Save $11,800
or as low as $1756/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×90
50×90
this size
$84,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,500 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • 300-Seat Capacity
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X90-CHURCH-EVENT-HALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

50 feet wide × 90 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. 50×90 delivers 4500 sq ft of public-use church & event hall space.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS50′ × 90′ · 4,500 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~450 in main sanctuary. Small congregations and event hosts use the full 3,4500 sq ft as an open assembly room seating roughly 300 in rows or 200 at round tables.

💡 Pro tip:300-Seat Capacity. Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×90 Church & Event Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church & Event Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church & Event Hall spec sheet.

Width50′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church & Event Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday church & event hall
Everyday church & event hall
4,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church & event hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch & event hall + seasonal storage
church & event hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×90 Church & Event Hall, what makes it different.

4,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1756/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×90 church & event hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1756/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×90?

4,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 90′ footprint with 4,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $36,000–$54,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church & Event Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 50×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×90 Church & Event Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×90 Church & Event Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church & Event Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$20,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church & Event Hall also viewed:

🏢 50×90

Fabrication Shop

50×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 50×90

Commercial Garage

50×90 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏡 50×90

Barndominium

50×90 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 50×90

Horse Barn

50×90 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 50×90

Warehouse

50×90 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🏢 50×90

Auto Repair Shop

50×90 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🌾 50×90

Equipment Storage Barn

50×90 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$83,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏭 50×90

Fleet Garage

50×90 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 50×90

Workshop Kit

50×90 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🎯 50×90

RV & Boat Storage

50×90 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$82,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 50×90

Retail & Showroom

50×90 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$84,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church & Event Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 50×90 church & event hall cost?

A 50×90 church & event hall from Steel and Stud starts at $84,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1756/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×90 church & event hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud church & event hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×90 church & event hall?

Almost always for 4,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church & event hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×90 church & event hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×90 church & event hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×90 church & event hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1756/month on a 50×90 church & event hall.

What warranty comes with the 50×90 church & event hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×90 church & event hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 50×90 church & event hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church & Event Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$84,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel structure church in three quarter view with cross, stained glass, and stone base

50×90 Church & Event Hall

4,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×90 steel building delivers 4,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$84,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black rv metal cover garage with four lit bays holding a motorhome, boat and campers

60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor | Steel and Stud, From $120,800

12

60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$137,700$120,800SAVE $16,900
or $2517/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, built for hobby and recreational use.

60×110 delivers 6600 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & travel trailer storage corridor space. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length rigs end-to-end under one continuous roof. The 100-foot run.

You’re viewing:RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$120,800$137,700Save $16,900
or as low as $2517/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$120,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Drive-Through Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-RV-TRAVEL-TRAILEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. 60×110 delivers 6600 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & travel trailer storage corridor space.

Multiple RV baysService / wash bayStorage + workshop60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length rigs end-to-end under one continuous roof.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Doors. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & travel trailer storage corridor
Everyday rv & travel trailer storage corridor
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & travel trailer storage corridor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage
rv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2517/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2517/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor also viewed:

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor cost?

A 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor from Steel and Stud starts at $120,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2517/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2517/month on a 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & travel trailer storage corridor to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black rv metal cover garage with four lit bays holding a motorhome, boat and campers

60×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel barn with white sliding doors, cupolas and horse stalls glowing at sunset

60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed | Steel and Stud, From $121,450

12

60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$138,450$121,450SAVE $17,000
or $2530/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed? At 6600 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor.

You’re viewing:Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$121,450$138,450Save $17,000
or as low as $2530/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$121,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Sides
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-HAY-EQUIPMENT-RUBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Looking for a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed? At 6600 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor through the open gable.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & equipment run-in shed
Everyday hay & equipment run-in shed
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & equipment run-in shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage
hay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2530/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2530/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed cost?

A 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $121,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2530/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2530/month on a 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$121,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel barn with white sliding doors, cupolas and horse stalls glowing at sunset

60×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$121,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay | Steel and Stud, From $122,650

12

60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$139,800$122,650SAVE $17,150
or $2555/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Contractor Supply & Van Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 60×110 contractor supply & van bay packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the.

You’re viewing:Contractor Supply & Van Bay·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$122,650$139,800Save $17,150
or as low as $2555/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$122,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • Fully Enclosed
  • Van Pull-In
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-CONTRACTOR-SUPPLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 60×110 contractor supply & van bay packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Inventory racksLoading bayOffice / Desk60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the end bay of the 60×110 and use the remaining 80 feet as a walk-in supply room for fittings, conduit, and fixtures.

💡 Pro tip:Van Pull-In.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Supply & Van Bay spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor supply & van bay
Everyday contractor supply & van bay
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor supply & van bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage
contractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2555/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 contractor supply & van bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2555/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Supply & Van Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Supply & Van Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Supply & Van Bay also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Supply & Van Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 contractor supply & van bay cost?

A 60×110 contractor supply & van bay from Steel and Stud starts at $122,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2555/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 contractor supply & van bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 contractor supply & van bay?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 contractor supply & van bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 contractor supply & van bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 contractor supply & van bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2555/month on a 60×110 contractor supply & van bay.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 contractor supply & van bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 contractor supply & van bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 60×110 contractor supply & van bay meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Supply & Van Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$122,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

60×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$122,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Olive metal workshop with windowed sectional door, cupola, and glowing windows at mountain sunset

60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench | Steel and Stud, From $120,800

12

60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$137,700$120,800SAVE $16,900
or $2517/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Our 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to.

You’re viewing:Long Workshop & Hobby Bench·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$120,800$137,700Save $16,900
or as low as $2517/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$120,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Roof
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-LONG-WORKSHOP-HOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Our 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

💡 Pro tip:R-19 Insulation. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday long workshop & hobby bench
Everyday long workshop & hobby bench
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a long workshop & hobby bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlong workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage
long workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2517/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2517/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Long Workshop & Hobby Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Long Workshop & Hobby Bench also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench cost?

A 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench from Steel and Stud starts at $120,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2517/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2517/month on a 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 60×110 long workshop & hobby bench typically adds $52,800–$79,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Olive metal workshop with windowed sectional door, cupola, and glowing windows at mountain sunset

60×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport sheltering a boat, pickup and Jeep beside a lakefront fence line

60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud, From $120,800

12

60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$137,700$120,800SAVE $16,900
or $2517/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski trailers.

You’re viewing:Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$120,800$137,700Save $16,900
or as low as $2517/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$120,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Hurricane Cert
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-SINGLE-LANE-BOATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Boat + trailerDaily driverOutboard / rinse60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski trailers, and a center-console end-to-end.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane Cert.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-lane boat & trailer storage
Everyday single-lane boat & trailer storage
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-lane boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
single-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2517/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2517/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage cost?

A 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $120,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2517/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2517/month on a 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a single-lane boat & trailer storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport sheltering a boat, pickup and Jeep beside a lakefront fence line

60×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal building with roll-up door and attached lean-to sheltering tractor, UTV and boat

60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack | Steel and Stud, From $123,050

12

60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$140,300$123,050SAVE $17,250
or $2564/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 60-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Steel fabricators, irrigation contractors, and pool builders rack.

You’re viewing:Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$123,050$140,300Save $17,250
or as low as $2564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$123,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • Forklift Clearance
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-PIPE-REBAR-LONG-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your pipe, rebar & long-stock rack layout.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 60-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · pipe, rebar & long-stock rack layout

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack layout.

Our 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 60-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Steel fabricators, irrigation contractors, and pool builders rack 20-foot and 40-foot lengths inside cantilever stands along the 100-foot wall. Forklift access through both gables turns the building into a covered drive-through pull yard for long material.

💡 Pro tip:Forklift Clearance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

DAILY USEEveryday pipe, rebar & long-stock rack
Everyday pipe, rebar & long-stock rack
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage
pipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack cost?

A 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack from Steel and Stud starts at $123,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2564/month on a 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$123,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal building with roll-up door and attached lean-to sheltering tractor, UTV and boat

60×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$123,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel barn with cupolas, lean-to porch and horse stalls at sunset

60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow | Steel and Stud, From $121,450

12

60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$138,450$121,450SAVE $17,000
or $2530/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, built for farm and ranch demands.

60×110 delivers 6600 sq ft of rugged single-row horse stall shedrow space. Hobby farmers convert the 60×110 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area. Dutch doors face outward along the long sidewall for.

You’re viewing:Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$121,450$138,450Save $17,000
or as low as $2530/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$121,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • Dutch Doors
  • Insulated Roof
  • Wood Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-SINGLE-ROW-HORSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-stall stable.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Full-height clearance supports hay loft (~320 bales). 60×110 delivers 6600 sq ft of rugged single-row horse stall shedrow space.

8 stalls + tack12-FT CENTER AISLEHay loft + Wash bay60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · multi-stall stable

8 stalls + tack · 12-ft center aisle · Hay loft + Wash bay

8 stalls + tack at the front, 12-ft center aisle in the middle, hay loft + wash bay at the rear. Capacity: 8 horses, full stable ops. Hobby farmers convert the 60×110 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area.

💡 Pro tip:Dutch Doors. Size affords: hay loft, wash bay with hot water, feed room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

DAILY USEEveryday single-row horse stall shedrow
Everyday single-row horse stall shedrow
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-row horse stall shedrow.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage
single-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2530/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2530/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow cost?

A 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow from Steel and Stud starts at $121,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2530/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2530/month on a 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$121,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel barn with cupolas, lean-to porch and horse stalls at sunset

60×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$121,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Rust red steel carport with black roof covering a pickup, SUV and sedan near a lake

60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover | Steel and Stud, From $122,650

12

60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$139,800$122,650SAVE $17,150
or $2555/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gun clubs and private ranges cover a 100-foot firing line with an.

You’re viewing:Outdoor Shooting Range Cover·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$122,650$139,800Save $17,150
or as low as $2555/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$122,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Front
  • Low Eave
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-OUTDOOR-SHOOTINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your outdoor shooting range cover layout.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · outdoor shooting range cover layout

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gun clubs and private ranges cover a 100-foot firing line with an open-sided 60×110 to keep shooters dry without obstructing target sightlines. The narrow depth puts the roof directly over the bench while leaving downrange visibility wide open.

💡 Pro tip:Low Eave.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Outdoor Shooting Range Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday outdoor shooting range cover
Everyday outdoor shooting range cover
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a outdoor shooting range cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWoutdoor shooting range cover + seasonal storage
outdoor shooting range cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2555/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2555/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Outdoor Shooting Range Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Outdoor Shooting Range Cover also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏡 60×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

60×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover cost?

A 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover from Steel and Stud starts at $122,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2555/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud outdoor shooting range cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud outdoor shooting range cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2555/month on a 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 60×110 outdoor shooting range cover meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$122,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Rust red steel carport with black roof covering a pickup, SUV and sedan near a lake

60×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$122,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with stone wainscot, timber porch and three roll-up bays

60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $120,800

12

60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$137,700$120,800SAVE $16,900
or $2517/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×110Property-Line Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 60×110 property-line detached garage packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Our 60×110 property-line detached garage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths.

You’re viewing:Property-Line Detached Garage·Size60×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$120,800$137,700Save $16,900
or as low as $2517/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×110
60×110
this size
$120,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,600 sq ft enclosed
  • Fully Enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X110-PROPERTY-LINE-DEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

60 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 60×110 property-line detached garage packs 6600 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

6 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay60′ × 110′ · 6,600 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

6 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

6 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 6 vehicles + full hobby shop. Our 60×110 property-line detached garage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

💡 Pro tip:Wainscoting. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Property-Line Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Property-Line Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width60′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Property-Line Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday property-line detached garage
Everyday property-line detached garage
6,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a property-line detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWproperty-line detached garage + seasonal storage
property-line detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage, what makes it different.

6,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2517/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×110 property-line detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2517/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×110?

6,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 110′ footprint with 6,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $52,800–$79,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Property-Line Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Property-Line Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$29,700+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Property-Line Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 60×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

60×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 60×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

60×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 60×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

60×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 60×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

60×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 60×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

60×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$120,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 60×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

60×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 60×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

60×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 60×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

60×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🌾 60×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

60×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$121,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 60×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

60×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$122,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 60×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

60×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$123,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Property-Line Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 60×110 property-line detached garage cost?

A 60×110 property-line detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $120,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2517/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×110 property-line detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud property-line detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×110 property-line detached garage?

Almost always for 6,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud property-line detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×110 property-line detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×110 property-line detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×110 property-line detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2517/month on a 60×110 property-line detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 60×110 property-line detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×110 property-line detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 60×110 property-line detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 60×110 property-line detached garage typically adds $52,800–$79,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Property-Line Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with stone wainscot, timber porch and three roll-up bays

60×110 Property-Line Detached Garage

6,600 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×110 steel building delivers 6,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$120,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart